1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
PE-Stamped Plans Included|Design Online in 3D|Financing from $89/mo

Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings For Sale

Commercial shops, industrial warehouses, farm buildings and specialty structures from $14,500. Cold-formed galvanized steel frames ship with PE-stamped engineered drawings tailored to your local wind speed and snow load requirements. Every Steel and Stud order includes free nationwide delivery. Widths from 30 to 100+ feet, lengths to 200+ feet, column-free interiors or multi-bay layouts.

$14,500
STARTING PRICE
13+
BUILDING TYPES
200ft
MAX CLEAR SPAN
48
STATES COVERED
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 841–880 of 2788 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Golden brown metal shed loafing shelter with open bays in red rock desert

30×36 Livestock Shelter with Lean-To Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To | Steel and Stud — From $15,750
12
30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,950$15,750SAVE $2,200
or $328/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Livestock Shelter Lean To

30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 livestock shelter lean to from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Livestock Shelter Lean To·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,750$17,950Save $2,200
or as low as $328/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×35
smaller
$15,300
30×36
this size
$15,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-LIVESTOCK-SHELTEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock run-in layout.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. Open south face, windbreak on the north wall. The 30×36 livestock shelter lean to from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Loafing / run-in baysFeed alleySupply + tack room30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · livestock run-in layout

Loafing / run-in bays · Feed alley · Supply + tack room

Loafing / run-in bays at the front, feed alley in the middle, supply + tack room at the rear. Capacity: 7 head with turnout access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: windbreak panels, headlocks, kidding/calving pen.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Shelter Lean To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Shelter Lean To spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Shelter Lean To.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock shelter lean to
Everyday livestock shelter lean to
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock shelter lean to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock shelter lean to + seasonal storage
livestock shelter lean to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$328/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 livestock shelter lean to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $328/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Shelter Lean To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Shelter Lean To also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🏡 30×36

Barndominium Shell

30×36 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏭 30×36

Welding and Fabrication Shop

30×36 welding and fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Shelter Lean To questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to cost?

A 30×36 livestock shelter lean to from Steel and Stud starts at $15,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $328/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 livestock shelter lean to price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock shelter lean to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock shelter lean to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $328/month on a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 livestock shelter lean to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 livestock shelter lean to in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 livestock shelter lean to typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Shelter Lean To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Golden brown metal shed loafing shelter with open bays in red rock desert

30×36 Livestock Shelter with Lean-To Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To | Steel and Stud — From $15,750
12
30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,950$15,750SAVE $2,200
or $328/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Livestock Shelter Lean To

30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 livestock shelter lean to from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Livestock Shelter Lean To·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,750$17,950Save $2,200
or as low as $328/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×35
smaller
$15,300
30×36
this size
$15,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-LIVESTOCK-SHELTEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock run-in layout.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. Open south face, windbreak on the north wall. The 30×36 livestock shelter lean to from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Loafing / run-in baysFeed alleySupply + tack room30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · livestock run-in layout

Loafing / run-in bays · Feed alley · Supply + tack room

Loafing / run-in bays at the front, feed alley in the middle, supply + tack room at the rear. Capacity: 7 head with turnout access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: windbreak panels, headlocks, kidding/calving pen.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Shelter Lean To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Shelter Lean To spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Shelter Lean To.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock shelter lean to
Everyday livestock shelter lean to
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock shelter lean to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock shelter lean to + seasonal storage
livestock shelter lean to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$328/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 livestock shelter lean to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $328/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Shelter Lean To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Livestock Shelter Lean To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Shelter Lean To also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🏡 30×36

Barndominium Shell

30×36 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏭 30×36

Welding and Fabrication Shop

30×36 welding and fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Shelter Lean To questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to cost?

A 30×36 livestock shelter lean to from Steel and Stud starts at $15,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $328/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 livestock shelter lean to price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock shelter lean to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock shelter lean to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $328/month on a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 livestock shelter lean to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 livestock shelter lean to in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 livestock shelter lean to add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 livestock shelter lean to typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Shelter Lean To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×35 Metal Building Kits Built for Two-Car Garages

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
A 25×35 metal building gives you 875 sq ft of clear-span steel space, we ship it free across 48 states and our crews install it in 4-6 weeks.


25’x35′ ft
Footprint
875 sq ft
Floor Space
8′-20′ configurable
Leg Height
3 styles
Roof Options
12 or 14 GA
Frame Gauge
4-6 weeks
Lead Time

25×35 Metal Building Specs, Dimensions & Custom Options

Below are the buildable specs for the 25×35 footprint, every row reflects what you can actually order in the 3D builder, not theoretical maximums. Pair these with your county code to lock in the right gauge, pitch, and certification.

Building Footprint 25′ Wide × 35′ Long Leg heights configurable from 8 ft to 20 ft, giving roughly 875 sq ft of usable interior floor space.
Total Square Footage 875 square feet of usable interior space, enough for two full-size vehicles side by side plus a 10-foot workbench depth at the rear wall.
Building Configurations Supports two-car garage, detached shop, RV cover, hobby barn, or combo garage-and-workshop layouts; clear-span 25-foot interior means no center post.
Enclosure Options Order as an open carport, partially enclosed with one or two walls and gable ends, fully enclosed with four walls, or custom side configurations for lean-to additions.
Roof Style Options Regular Roof with rounded corners and horizontal panels, A-Frame Horizontal (Boxed Eave), or Vertical Roof (recommended for snow and rain runoff on the 35-foot length).
Roof Pitch Options Standard 3:12 pitch handles most regions, with 4:12 and 5:12 pitch upgrades available for heavy-snow zones like CO, MI, MN, NY, and ME.
Frame Gauge Options 14-gauge galvanized steel tubing standard; 12-gauge upgrade available (33% thicker walls, extended structural warranty, recommended for high-wind and hurricane zones).
Roof & Wall Panels 29-gauge sheet metal panels standard, 26-gauge upgrade available for hail-prone or coastal climates; horizontal or vertical panel orientation.
Color Options 17 standard colors for roof, walls, and trim, all panels powder-coated with G90 hot-dipped zinc base for 20-year fade resistance.
Door Options Roll-up garage doors in 8×8, 9×8, 10×8, and 12×12; walk-in doors at 3×6 or 3×7; sliding barn doors and French doors for residential builds.
Window Options Single-hung 30×30 standard, custom sizes available, with screens, grids, and security bars optional for shop or home-office conversions.
Insulation Options Single-bubble or double-bubble radiant barrier, R-13 vapor-faced batt, R-19 fiberglass batt, or spray foam, chosen by climate and use case.
Anchoring Options Concrete wedge anchors, asphalt anchors, mobile home anchors, or auger ground anchors, included with the kit and selected by installation surface.
Installation Surface Installs on concrete slab, asphalt, gravel pad, or compacted ground; site must be level within 2 inches across the 25×35 footprint.
Certification & Permits Stamped engineered drawings available where required by county code; IBC and IRC compliant builds available for permitted installations.
Snow Load Rating 30-65 PSF depending on pitch and gauge; certified engineering provided for ASCE 7-22 heavy-snow zones above 35 PSF ground load.
Wind Load Rating 100-140 MPH depending on configuration; hurricane-rated 170+ MPH certifications available for FL, TX, NC, SC, and LA Gulf coastal zones.
Lead Time 4-6 weeks from order confirmation to install in most regions; 6-10 weeks for engineered certified builds with stamped drawings.
Delivery Free delivery to all 48 continental US states; final-mile coordination handled for remote rural sites and tight residential lots.
Warranty 20-year rust-through warranty on panels and frame, plus 1-year workmanship warranty covering installation labor and fastener integrity.
20
Year
Frame Warranty
Limited + Product Pledge
20
Year
Sheet Metal Warranty
Paint Finish
90
Day
14-Gauge Frame
Workmanship Guarantee
90
Day
12-Gauge Frame
Workmanship Guarantee

12 Popular 25×35 Metal Building Uses (875 Sq Ft Layouts)

875 square feet flexes hard, wide enough for two vehicles side by side, deep enough for a real workshop bay, and tall enough (with a 12-foot leg height) for a single-axle RV or a car lift. Here are the twelve configurations buyers order most often on the 25×35 footprint, with the dimension chip and spec stack each one typically lands on.

Don’t see your exact use case? Our advisors will help configure your 25×35 for any application. Request a free quote.

What’s Included in a 25×35 Metal Building Kit?

Every 25×35 metal building ships as a complete kit, framing, panels, fasteners, anchors, trim, and engineered drawings, with free delivery and (on tubular-frame builds) free professional installation. Here’s the full standard-vs-upgrade breakdown so you know what’s in the base $11,100 price and what changes the quote.

Free With Every 25×35 Order

Standard configuration items at no extra cost.

  • 14-Gauge Galvanized Steel FrameStandard tubular framing in 14-gauge G90 hot-dipped zinc-coated steel, the same spec MBMA references for residential and light commercial structures, and what 80% of 25×35 buyers order.
  • 29-Gauge Sheet Metal PanelsRoof and wall panels in 29-gauge sheet metal, color-matched to your 17-color palette, with hidden-fastener overlap detail to prevent leak paths along the 35-foot panel runs.
  • Standard Regular Roof StyleBase price includes the Regular Roof (rounded corners, horizontal panels), the most economical option and well-suited for low-snow regions across the southern half of the 48 continental US states.
  • Stamped Engineered Drawings (Where Required)Every certified 25×35 ships with stamped engineered drawings showing wind, snow, and foundation specs, what your county permit office needs to issue a building permit.
  • Anchors for Your SurfaceConcrete wedge anchors, asphalt anchors, mobile-home anchors, or auger ground anchors, whichever matches your installation surface, are included in the kit at no upcharge.
  • Color-Matched Trim & FlashingsRidge caps, eave trim, corner trim, gable trim, and rake trim all color-matched to your chosen roof, walls, or accent palette, plus color-coded screws across every panel.
  • Free Delivery to 48 StatesDelivery is included to all 48 continental US states, no fuel surcharge, no per-mile fee, no minimum order. Final-mile routing is coordinated for tight residential lots and rural sites.
  • Free Professional InstallationTubular-frame 25×35 builds include free installation on your prepared surface, concrete, asphalt, gravel, or compacted ground. Crews are factory-trained and follow OSHA workplace safety standards.
  • 20-Year Rust-Through WarrantyPanels and frame carry a 20-year rust-through warranty backed by the G90 zinc coating and powder-coated paint system, with documented fade resistance under UV exposure across all climates.
  • Standard Leg Height (8′-10′)Base configurations ship with 8-10 ft leg heights, which fit a standard two-car garage, light workshop, or storage building without certification upcharges in most counties.
  • Choice of Open or EnclosedOrder open (carport-style), partially enclosed with gable ends and one or two walls, or fully enclosed with four walls, the framing is identical, so you only pay for the panels you spec.
  • Configuration in the sensei3d BuilderEvery buyer gets free access to sensei3d (the 3D building configurator) to design, save, and submit the 25×35 spec, the platform locks your build sheet before the 24-hour quote returns.

+ Popular 25×35 Building Upgrades

Common add-ons buyers select on this footprint.

  • 12-Gauge Frame UpgradeStep up to 12-gauge tubular framing, 33% thicker walls, longer structural warranty, and required by many counties in FEMA-designated high-wind and hurricane zones along the Gulf and Atlantic coasts.
  • 26-Gauge Sheet Metal UpgradeHeavier 26-gauge roof and wall panels resist hail, hurricane debris, and salt-air corrosion, a common upgrade for buyers in Tornado Alley and coastal hurricane zones.
  • Vertical Roof UpgradeThe Vertical Roof routes water and snow straight off the 35-foot length, recommended for any state with snow load above 30 PSF and required for ASCE 7-22 heavy-snow certifications.
  • 4:12 or 5:12 Roof PitchSteeper pitch upgrades shed snow faster and improve loft headroom, pick this if you’re in NY, CO, MI, MN, ME, or any other heavy-snow region with code thresholds above 35 PSF ground load.
  • Roll-Up Garage DoorsAdd roll-up doors sized at 8×8, 9×8, 10×8, 10×10, or 12×12, Wayne Dalton-style construction with insulated panel options and optional chain, belt, or Wi-Fi openers.
  • Walk-In Personnel DoorsInsulated 36-inch walk-in doors with full weatherstripping, deadbolt locksets, and optional keypad or smart-lock entry, required by IBC for any enclosed shop with regular occupancy.
  • Windows & SkylightsSingle-hung 30×30 windows, custom-sized storefront windows, or roof skylights for natural light, popular on home-office, studio, and she-shed conversions of the 25×35 footprint.
  • Insulation PackagesDouble-bubble radiant barrier, R-13 vapor-faced batt, R-19 fiberglass batt, or closed-cell spray foam, picked based on your climate zone and whether you’ll heat or cool the interior.
  • Wainscoting (Two-Tone Walls)A contrasting lower wall band (typically 3-4 ft tall) adds residential curb appeal, common on man-cave, she-shed, and home-office builds where the 25×35 sits in view of the main house.
  • Lean-To AdditionAdd a 10-12 ft lean-to on one or both sides for outdoor equipment storage, a wood pile, or a covered workspace, increases usable footprint without adding interior square footage to the permit.
  • Mezzanine or Loft FloorEngineered loft framing over a portion of the 25×35 footprint adds storage above without expanding the building, popular for workshops, hobby barns, and tack-room layouts.

Customize & Build Your 25×35 Metal Building Online

The 3D builder is where you actually spec the 25×35, pick roof style, leg height, doors, colors, and certifications in real time, save the build, and submit it for a 24-hour custom quote. Open sensei3d (the 3D building configurator) any time and design at your pace.

Leg Height (8′ to 20′)

Two-car garages typically land at 9-10 ft. A two-post car lift needs 11-12 ft minimum clearance.

3 Roof Styles

Regular Roof is cheapest and works for dry-climate 25×35 garages. A-Frame Horizontal handles moderate snow.

Roof Pitch & Slope

Standard 3:12 pitch covers most regions across the 48 continental US states. Upgrade to 4:12 or 5:12 in heavy-snow zones (CO, NY, MI, MN, ME) for faster snow shedding and.

Frame Gauge (14 or 12)

14-gauge is the default and fits standard wind zones. 12-gauge upgrade adds 33% thicker tubing, order it if you’re in a FEMA hurricane zone, Tornado Alley, or any county.

Sheet Metal Gauge (29 or 26)

29-gauge handles most climates. Upgrade to 26-gauge for hail-prone regions, coastal salt exposure, or anywhere you want extended paint life beyond the 20-year rust-through warranty.

Certification & Engineering

Certified 25×35 builds include stamped engineered drawings, foundation plans, and ASCE 7-22 wind and snow calcs, required for permits in most counties and all coastal hurricane zones.

Roll-Up Garage Doors

Pick from 8×8, 9×8, 10×8, 10×10, or 12×12 roll-ups. Two-car 25×35 garages usually run two 9x8s on the 25-foot gable end.

Walk-In Doors

36-inch insulated personnel doors with full frames, weatherstripping, and deadbolts. Required by IBC for any enclosed 25×35 with regular occupancy, and standard on workshop and home-office builds.

Hydraulic & Rapid Doors

Commercial buyers can spec hydraulic one-piece doors or high-speed rapid-roll doors with smart access integration, useful for fleet-storage and detached-shop 25×35 configurations.

Windows & Skylights

Single-hung 30×30 standard, with custom storefront windows for studios and skylights for shops. Add screens, grids, or security bars for residential or commercial security.

Framed Openings

Pre-framed openings for future doors, HVAC penetrations, or expansion let you skip cutting steel later. Spec them now in the 3D builder if you might add a window or door.

Garage Door Openers & Windows

Chain-drive, belt-drive, or Wi-Fi-enabled openers pair with any roll-up. Add window kits to the roll-up itself for natural light in two-car garage and workshop layouts.

17 Standard Color Options

Choose from Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Patriot Red, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White, all.

Mix-and-Match Roof, Walls, Trim

Spec different colors per surface, popular combos include White walls with Barn Red roof, or Pewter Gray walls with Black trim. The 3D builder previews every combination in real.

Wainscoting (Two-Tone Walls)

A contrasting 3-4 ft lower wall band lifts the residential curb appeal of a 25×35 sitting next to your house. Common on man-cave, she-shed, and home-office conversions.

Galvalume (Bare Metal Finish)

Hot-dipped aluminum-zinc coating delivers a clean industrial look at lower cost than painted panels. Popular on rural hobby barns, equipment storage, and detached shops.

Painted Trim & Flashings

Color-matched ridge caps, eave trim, corner trim, gable trim, and rake trim tie the build together. Color-coded screws across every panel keep the exterior visually clean.

Custom Color Match

Need to match an existing house or HOA palette? Custom color matching is available with a sample submission and modest paint upcharge, common on residential 25×35 garage builds.

Insulation Options

Single-bubble or double-bubble radiant barrier, R-13 vapor-faced batt, R-19 fiberglass batt, or closed-cell spray foam, pick based on climate zone and whether you’ll heat or cool the 875 sq.

Lean-To Additions

Add 10-12 ft lean-tos on one or both sides of the 25×35 for outdoor equipment, wood storage, or covered workspace, extends usable area without expanding the permitted footprint.

Mezzanines & Lofts

Engineered loft framing over part of the 25×35 adds vertical storage without growing the slab. Common in workshop and tack-room layouts where you want gear off the floor.

Interior Partitions

Divide the 875 sq ft into a car bay plus shop, office plus storage, or stalls plus tack room, steel-stud or insulated metal panel walls handle most layouts.

Trim, Anchors, Gables

Decorative gable accents, contrasting trim, and engineered ridge caps lift residential builds out of the ‘shed’ category. Concrete wedge anchors lock the frame to your slab.

Flooring Prep

A 4-inch reinforced concrete slab is the standard 25×35 foundation. Gravel pads work for storage and carport configurations; slab specs are included in your engineered drawings.

Wind & Snow Certification

Standard 115 MPH wind / 35 PSF snow. Upgrade to 170+ MPH for FL, TX, NC, SC, and LA Gulf coasts, or 65+ PSF snow for heavy-snow states like NY.

Permit-Ready Drawings

Stamped engineered drawings cover IBC, IRC, NEC, IFGC, IECC, and IMC compliance, what your county permit office needs to issue a building permit for the 25×35.

Door Locks & Access Control

Slide bolts, deadbolts, keypad entry, smart locks, Wi-Fi garage door openers, and Knox box options, pick based on whether the 25×35 is residential, commercial, or shared storage.

Fire Safety & Alarms

Smoke and heat detectors, ABC fire extinguishers, exit signage, and sprinkler-ready framing for commercial 25×35 shops, required by OSHA workplace safety standards in occupied workspaces.

Anchoring System

Concrete wedge, asphalt, mobile-home, or auger ground anchors included with every kit. The right anchor is picked from your site survey before the engineered drawings are stamped.

Solar & Roof-Top Loads

Engineered framing supports rooftop solar arrays, satellite dishes, and HVAC condensers, spec reinforced roof framing in the 3D builder if you plan to add solar on the 25×35.

25x35 Metal Building Codes, Permits & Engineering

Permit rules for an 875 sq ft 25x35 vary by county, but most jurisdictions treat it as a structure requiring a building permit, foundation plan, and (often) stamped engineered drawings. Steel and Stud provides the engineering, you handle the local permit office.

IBC/IRC
Minimum construction standards for building codes
NEC
Electrical safety to reduce fire and shock risk
IFGC
Safe operation of fuel gas appliances and equipment
IECC
Energy efficiency and conservation requirements
IMC
HVAC, ventilation, and exhaust system standards

We also adhere to plumbing codes, energy conservation standards, and any state or local requirements. Our team handles code compliance so you have total peace of mind.

How to Maintain a 25x35 Metal Building

A 25x35 metal building is built to be low-maintenance, but a few annual habits keep the paint looking fresh well past the warranty term. Plan on under two hours of total annual upkeep to keep the 20-year rust-through warranty intact and your kit performing at spec.

1
Walk the building twice a year
Walk the building twice a year (spring and fall) to check panel fasteners and re-torque any screws that have backed out, typically fewer than a dozen across the 875 sq ft surface.
2
Wash the wall and roof panels
Wash the wall and roof panels once a year with a garden hose and mild detergent to clear pollen, road salt, and atmospheric staining, this preserves the 20-year fade warranty.
3
Clear snow over 12 inches off
Clear snow over 12 inches off the roof in heavy-snow regions if your build is rated below 65 PSF, use a roof rake from ground level, never climb onto the panels.
4
Touch up scratches or chips with
Touch up scratches or chips with color-matched paint within 30 days to prevent rust intrusion, Steel and Stud ships a touch-up kit with every order.
5
Inspect anchors and base trim after
Inspect anchors and base trim after major storms or freeze-thaw cycles, especially on slab installations, replace any anchor showing corrosion at the concrete interface.
6
Clear gutters and lean-to drainage twice
Clear gutters and lean-to drainage twice a year if you've added them, and confirm the site grade still drains away from the 25-foot side walls.

What Can You Do with 875 Square Feet?

875 sq ft sounds abstract until you start parking real things in it. Here's what actually fits inside the 25x35 footprint, measured against full-size vehicles, standard workshop gear, and common storage loads.

Workshop & Fabrication

Two full-size pickups (Ford F-150, Chevy Silverado) parked side by side with 4-5 ft of walking room and a 10-ft-deep workbench wall at the back.

RV & Motorhome Storage

One Class C motorhome up to 32 ft plus a tow vehicle, with a 12-14 ft leg height clearing the rooftop AC and antenna.

Bike & Gear Storage

Two cars plus a motorcycle, two bicycles, a workbench, and a wall-mounted tool pegboard with room left for a small upright freezer.

Equestrian Use

A two-stall horse barn with 12x12 stalls, a 10-ft center aisle, a tack room corner, and gable-end sliding barn doors for drive-through access.

Workshop & Fabrication 2

A workshop with a table saw, miter station, drill press, welder cart, two rolling tool chests, a finishing bench, and a 4x8 assembly table.

Boat & Trailer Storage

A boat (24-26 ft on trailer) plus two PWCs on dollies, with a 12x10 roll-up door clearing the windshield and a 4-ft tail buffer.

A home office layout

A home office layout with two desk zones, a meeting table for six, a small kitchenette, a storage closet, and storefront windows on the south wall.

Farm & Ranch Use

A hobby-farm equipment barn fitting a compact tractor, a UTV, a 60-inch finish mower, hay bales for two horses, and a feed-storage corner.

3 Ways to Order Your 25x35 Metal Building

Customize your 25x35 steel building in our free 3D builder, request a free custom quote, or talk directly with a building expert. Reservation deposit typically 10% to 30% based on your state and manufacturer.

Request Free 25x35 Quote

Free custom design, reply within 24 hours

Tell us the configuration you want, roof style, doors, gauge, color, and certification, and our team returns a stamped quote within 24 hours. This path suits buyers who already know their spec and want a real price fast without configuring the 3D model themselves.

  • 24-hour quote turnaround on every request
  • Free engineered drawings included
  • Free delivery to 48 continental US states
  • Flexible 10-30% deposit to reserve build slot
  • 20-year rust-through warranty locked at quote

Get My Free 25x35 Quote →

Free quote. Flexible deposit to reserve after approval.

Talk to a 25x35 Building Expert

Fastest answers, call or chat now

Call our building experts and walk through your 25x35 spec on the phone, roof style, doors, leg height, certifications, and lead time. This path suits buyers who want a human to confirm the right configuration before submitting the order or 3D build.

  • Direct line to factory-trained experts
  • Same-day spec review on most calls
  • Honest pricing, always a range, never a trick
  • Help interpreting county code requirements
  • Free over-the-phone configuration

📞 Call 1-877-275-7048 →

Toll-free. Speak with an expert now.

How the 3D Builder Works

Four steps in sensei3d get you from blank slate to a saved 25x35 build sheet ready for a 24-hour quote.

Choose structure icon

Pick Your Size

Start with the 25x35 footprint pre-loaded. Adjust leg height between 8 and 20 ft based on whether you're configuring a two-car garage, an RV cover, or a tall storage build.

Customize icon

Choose Roof Style

Select Regular Roof, A-Frame Horizontal (Boxed Eave), or Vertical Roof. The builder shows live previews and flags which styles are required for your snow zone.

Save icon

Add Doors, Windows, Colors

Drop in roll-up garage doors, walk-in personnel doors, windows, and skylights. Pick from 17 standard colors for roof, walls, trim, and wainscoting bands.

Order icon

Get Your Quote

Submit the saved build sheet and Steel and Stud returns a stamped 24-hour custom quote with engineered drawings, gauge spec, and delivery timeline.

Ready to design your custom 25x35 metal building in 3D?

Customize My 25x35 in sensei3d →

Tip: Open sensei3d in a new tab so you can keep this page open for spec and certification reference. No deposit until you approve the final spec.

How Much Does a 25x35 Metal Building Cost?

A 25x35 metal building kit costs between $11,100 and $14,100 fully installed, depending on roof style, frame gauge, certifications, and door package. We always quote a range, never a single point price, because two 25x35 builds in two different counties can legitimately differ by $3,000 once code-driven upgrades land.

Your Location

Delivery is free to all 48 states, but local wind and snow code requirements drive certification upgrades. Coastal hurricane zones and heavy-snow states typically add $500-$1,500 in engineering and gauge.

Steel Gauge

14-gauge framing keeps the build at the $11,100 floor. The 12-gauge upgrade adds roughly $1,000-$1,800 and is required in many high-wind counties, order it for hurricane and Tornado Alley zones.

Roof & Layout

Regular Roof is cheapest. A-Frame Horizontal adds a small premium. Vertical Roof costs more but is required for snow above 30 PSF and recommended on the 35-foot length for drainage.

Certification

Stamped engineered drawings with ASCE 7-22 wind and snow calcs add to the quote but unlock county permits. Plan for an engineering line item if you're in any IBC-adopting jurisdiction.

Doors & Access

Each roll-up door, walk-in door, window, and skylight adds to the quote. A two-car 25x35 garage with two 9x8 roll-ups and a walk-in door typically lands at the midpoint of the price range.

Site Conditions & Slab

Concrete slab installs are easiest and use standard wedge anchors. Gravel, asphalt, and ground installs all work but may need anchor or site-prep upgrades. Concrete slab (not included): a 25x35 slab typically costs $3,500-$7,000 depending on thickness, rebar, and regional labor, budget this separately before comparing total installed cost against wood or pole barn alternatives.

Steel vs. Pole Barn vs. Wood

At the 25x35 footprint, a steel kit typically runs $11,100-$14,100 installed. A comparable pole barn runs $12,000-$18,000 once engineered trusses and treated lumber are priced in. Wood stick-frame at 875 sq ft typically exceeds $20,000 with labor, steel wins on speed, warranty, and total cost at this size.

25x35 Metal Building Complete Price Range

$11,100to$14,100

Triple Wide Garage, 875 sqft @ ~$14.39/sqft, ±12% range for options. Excludes sales tax, shipping, site prep, concrete slab, permits, and install add-ons.

Get My Free 25x35 Custom Quote →

20+
Years in Business
15,000+
Buildings Installed
A+
BBB Rating
4.8/5
Customer Rating
20-Year Rust-Through
Warranty

Flexible Financing & Rent-To-Own

Choose the payment path that fits your project and budget

Traditional Financing

Credit Check Required

  • Loans available across the 48 continental US states
  • Competitive rates from partner lenders
  • Flexible 24-84 month repayment terms
  • Simple online application, fast decision
  • Ownership of your 25x35 from day one

Check Eligibility

Rent-To-Own (RTO)

No Credit Check

  • No credit check required to qualify
  • Fast approval, typically same day
  • Low upfront payment to start
  • Affordable monthly payment plans
  • Own your 25x35 at end of term

Apply for RTO

How Delivery & Installation Works

Four steps from order confirmation to a finished 25x35 on your site.

Order icon

Place Your Order

Lock the build with a 10-30% reservation deposit after quote approval, your slot in production is now reserved.

Step 1

Manufacturing icon

Production

Steel and Stud fabricates your 25x35 frame, panels, doors, and trim to spec, production runs 3-4 weeks, and we send a production confirmation email when your build enters the queue.

Step 2

Scheduling icon

Prepare the Site

Level your install surface within 2 inches and confirm anchor type, concrete, asphalt, gravel, or compacted ground. Your project coordinator contacts you one week before delivery to confirm site readiness and anchor type.

Step 3

Installation icon

Installation

Factory-trained crews deliver and install the 25x35 in 1-2 days on most sites, included free with tubular-frame builds.

Step 4

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Metal Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Metal Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

Compare 25x35 vs. Other Metal Building Sizes

The 25x35 sits in a tight cluster of mid-size footprints, and buyers usually compare it against 24x35, 24x36, and 28x36. Versus a 24x35, the 25x35 adds 35 sq ft and an extra foot of door clearance, small but meaningful when you're parking two full-size pickups.

Feature 22x35 Building 25x35 Building 28x36 Building 24x36 Building
Square Footage 770 sq ft 1,008 sq ft 864 sq ft
Use Capacity Tight two-car, single-car plus shop Two-car plus full shop, hobby barn Two-car garage, light shop
Access Potential One 9x8 or two 8x8 roll-ups Two 10x8 plus walk-in Two 9x8 roll-ups
Roof Style Regular or Vertical All 3 styles, Vertical recommended Regular or Vertical
Best For Budget two-car, single-bay shop Two-car plus dedicated shop Two-car standard garage
View 22x35 View 28x36 View 24x36

25x35 Metal Building FAQ: Cost, Permits, Sizes & Install

Quick answers to the most-asked 25x35 buyer questions.

A 25x35 metal building costs between $11,100 and $14,100 fully installed, with free delivery and free professional installation on tubular-frame builds. The exact quote depends on roof style, frame gauge (14 or 12), certifications, and your door and window package. Submit your spec through the 3D builder for a 24-hour stamped quote.
The 875 sq ft 25x35 footprint works as a two-car detached garage, a detached shop for tradespeople, an RV cover for Class C motorhomes, a hobby-farm equipment barn, a small two-stall horse barn, or a home office or studio. The 25-foot clear span means no center post regardless of layout.
Yes, the 25-foot width fits two full-size SUVs or pickups side by side with 4-5 feet of walking room between them, and the 35-foot length leaves a 10-foot-deep workbench wall at the back. Most two-car 25x35 garage builds spec two 9x8 roll-up doors on the gable end.
Free professional installation is included with every tubular-frame 25x35 kit ordered from Steel and Stud, no separate install fee. The $11,100-$14,100 price range is for the building delivered and installed on your prepared surface, anywhere in the 48 continental US states.
Lead time is 4-6 weeks from order confirmation to a finished build on your site for standard 25x35 configurations, and 6-10 weeks for engineered certified builds requiring stamped drawings. Actual on-site installation takes 1-2 days for factory-trained crews.
Yes, every 25x35 is custom-engineered. Pick roll-up garage doors in 8x8, 9x8, 10x8, 10x10, or 12x12, plus walk-in personnel doors, 30x30 windows, custom storefront windows, and skylights. Configure the full spec in sensei3d (the 3D building configurator) before submitting for a quote.
Yes, Steel and Stud sells the 25x35 as a complete kit with all framing, panels, fasteners, anchors, trim, and engineered drawings, we ship everything directly to your site. Self-install kits save on labor but skip the free professional installation included on standard tubular-frame orders. Confirm your install plan before ordering.
The Vertical Roof is recommended for the 25x35 in any region with snow load above 30 PSF or significant rainfall, because vertical panels shed water and snow off the 35-foot length faster. A-Frame Horizontal (Boxed Eave) works in moderate climates, and Regular Roof is the most economical for dry southern regions.
Most US counties require a building permit for any structure over 200 sq ft, so the 875 sq ft 25x35 will need one. Stamped engineered drawings are included on certified builds, bring those to your county permit office. Setback, lot-coverage, and HOA rules are owner-responsibility.
The 25x35 has 875 sq ft and prioritizes width, better for parking two full-size vehicles side by side. The 24x36 has 864 sq ft and prioritizes length, slightly deeper for fore-aft storage. Most two-car-garage buyers pick the 25x35 because side-by-side clearance matters more than depth.
Standard 25x35 builds ship and install in 4-6 weeks from order confirmation. Certified builds with stamped engineered drawings, hurricane wind ratings, or heavy-snow loads run 6-10 weeks. Reservation deposits lock your slot in production immediately after quote approval.
Yes, Steel and Stud offers traditional financing through partner lenders (credit check, competitive rates, 24-84 month terms) and rent-to-own (no credit check, fast approval, monthly payments toward ownership). Both paths cover the full $11,100-$14,100 price range on the 25x35.
14-gauge tubular framing is the standard spec and handles most regions. Order the 12-gauge upgrade if you're in a FEMA hurricane zone (FL, TX, NC, SC, LA Gulf), Tornado Alley, or any county requiring 140+ MPH wind certification. The 12-gauge adds 33% thicker tubing and extended warranty.
Yes, every 25x35 carries a 20-year rust-through warranty on panels and frame, backed by G90 hot-dipped zinc coating and powder-coated paint. Workmanship on the install is covered for 1 year. The warranty stays in effect with standard annual maintenance like fastener checks and panel washing.
The 25x35 installs on a concrete slab, asphalt, gravel pad, or compacted ground, each uses a different anchor type included with the kit. Concrete is the most common for permanent residential and commercial builds. The site must be level within 2 inches across the full footprint.
Yes, both are standard upgrades. A 10-12 ft lean-to on one or both sides adds covered outdoor space without expanding the permitted footprint. An engineered mezzanine or loft adds vertical storage over part of the 875 sq ft interior, popular for workshops and tack rooms.
The $11,100 floor includes the 14-gauge frame, 29-gauge panels, Regular Roof style, standard 8-10 ft leg height, all anchors and trim, free delivery to 48 states, free professional installation on tubular-frame builds, and the 20-year rust-through warranty. Upgrades and door packages move the price up from there.

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×35 Metal Building Kits Built for Two-Car Garages

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
A 25×35 metal building gives you 875 sq ft of clear-span steel space, we ship it free across 48 states and our crews install it in 4-6 weeks.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber prefab metal building with tall white roll-up door on open prairie grassland

25×35 Two-Car Detached Garage Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Two Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $11,100
12
25×35 Two Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Two Car Detached Garage

25×35 Two Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Two Car Detached Garage·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$11,100
30×35
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 25×35 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Two Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two car detached garage
Everyday two car detached garage
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo car detached garage + seasonal storage
two car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Two Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 two car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Two Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Two Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏢 25×35

Detached Shop for Tradespeople

25×35 detached shop for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop for Tradespeople →
🎯 25×35

Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio

25×35 hobby mechanic & woodworking studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio →
🏡 25×35

Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop

25×35 split-bay garage with partitioned shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 two car detached garage cost?

A 25×35 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 two car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud two car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 two car detached garage?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 two car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 two car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 two car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 25×35 two car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 two car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 two car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 two car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 two car detached garage typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber prefab metal building with tall white roll-up door on open prairie grassland

25×35 Two-Car Detached Garage Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Two Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $11,100
12
25×35 Two Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Two Car Detached Garage

25×35 Two Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Two Car Detached Garage·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$11,100
30×35
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 25×35 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Two Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two car detached garage
Everyday two car detached garage
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo car detached garage + seasonal storage
two car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Two Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 two car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Two Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Two Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏢 25×35

Detached Shop for Tradespeople

25×35 detached shop for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop for Tradespeople →
🎯 25×35

Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio

25×35 hobby mechanic & woodworking studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio →
🏡 25×35

Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop

25×35 split-bay garage with partitioned shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 two car detached garage cost?

A 25×35 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 two car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud two car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 two car detached garage?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 two car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 two car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 two car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 25×35 two car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 two car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 two car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 two car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 two car detached garage typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Woodgrain steel garage with black roll-up door beside a rocky mountain creek

16×24 Hay & Feed Storage Barn Metal Building Kit

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×24 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn | Steel and Stud — From $6,500
12
16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,400$6,500SAVE $900
or $135/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×24Hay Feed Storage Barn

16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×24 hay feed storage barn from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hay Feed Storage Barn·Size16×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,500$7,400Save $900
or as low as $135/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×24
16×24
this size
$6,500
16×28
longer
$7,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 384 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X24-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your feed + hay shed.

16 feet wide × 24 feet long. Elevated slab keeps feed dry. The 16×24 hay feed storage barn from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

Stacked hay / feedDRY-GOODS BINSLoading apron16′ × 24′ · 384 sq ft · feed + hay shed

Stacked hay / feed · Dry-goods bins · Loading apron

Stacked hay / feed at the front, dry-goods bins in the middle, loading apron at the rear. Capacity: ~72 sq bales stacked 3-high.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rodent-proof bins, gravel apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Feed Storage Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Feed Storage Barn spec sheet.

Width16'
Length24' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Feed Storage Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay feed storage barn
Everyday hay feed storage barn
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay feed storage barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay feed storage barn + seasonal storage
hay feed storage barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn — what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$135/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×24 hay feed storage barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $135/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×24?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 24′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Feed Storage Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Feed Storage Barn also viewed:

🏡 16×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

16×24 single-car metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →
🏡 16×24

Metal Workshop

16×24 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Storage Shed

16×24 storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Shed →
🏡 16×24

Backyard Home Office

16×24 backyard home office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Home Office →
🏡 16×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

16×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →
🏡 16×24

Pool House

16×24 pool house configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House →
🌾 16×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

16×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →
🌾 16×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

16×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →
🎯 16×24

ATV and Toy Storage

16×24 atv and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV and Toy Storage →
🎯 16×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

16×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Carport with Storage Bay

16×24 carport with storage bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Bay →
🏢 16×24

Small Business Storefront

16×24 small business storefront configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Storefront →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Feed Storage Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 16×24 hay feed storage barn cost?

A 16×24 hay feed storage barn from Steel and Stud starts at $6,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $135/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×24 hay feed storage barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay feed storage barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×24 hay feed storage barn?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay feed storage barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×24 hay feed storage barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×24 hay feed storage barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×24 hay feed storage barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $135/month on a 16×24 hay feed storage barn.

What warranty comes with the 16×24 hay feed storage barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×24 hay feed storage barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×24 hay feed storage barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×24 hay feed storage barn typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Feed Storage Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$6,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Woodgrain steel garage with black roll-up door beside a rocky mountain creek

16×24 Hay & Feed Storage Barn Metal Building Kit

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×24 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn | Steel and Stud — From $6,500
12
16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,400$6,500SAVE $900
or $135/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×24Hay Feed Storage Barn

16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×24 hay feed storage barn from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hay Feed Storage Barn·Size16×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,500$7,400Save $900
or as low as $135/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×24
16×24
this size
$6,500
16×28
longer
$7,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 384 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X24-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your feed + hay shed.

16 feet wide × 24 feet long. Elevated slab keeps feed dry. The 16×24 hay feed storage barn from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

Stacked hay / feedDRY-GOODS BINSLoading apron16′ × 24′ · 384 sq ft · feed + hay shed

Stacked hay / feed · Dry-goods bins · Loading apron

Stacked hay / feed at the front, dry-goods bins in the middle, loading apron at the rear. Capacity: ~72 sq bales stacked 3-high.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rodent-proof bins, gravel apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Feed Storage Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Feed Storage Barn spec sheet.

Width16'
Length24' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Feed Storage Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay feed storage barn
Everyday hay feed storage barn
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay feed storage barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay feed storage barn + seasonal storage
hay feed storage barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn — what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$135/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×24 hay feed storage barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $135/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×24?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 24′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Feed Storage Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×24 Hay Feed Storage Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Feed Storage Barn also viewed:

🏡 16×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

16×24 single-car metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →
🏡 16×24

Metal Workshop

16×24 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Storage Shed

16×24 storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Shed →
🏡 16×24

Backyard Home Office

16×24 backyard home office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Home Office →
🏡 16×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

16×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →
🏡 16×24

Pool House

16×24 pool house configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House →
🌾 16×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

16×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →
🌾 16×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

16×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →
🎯 16×24

ATV and Toy Storage

16×24 atv and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV and Toy Storage →
🎯 16×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

16×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Carport with Storage Bay

16×24 carport with storage bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Bay →
🏢 16×24

Small Business Storefront

16×24 small business storefront configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Storefront →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Feed Storage Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 16×24 hay feed storage barn cost?

A 16×24 hay feed storage barn from Steel and Stud starts at $6,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $135/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×24 hay feed storage barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay feed storage barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×24 hay feed storage barn?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay feed storage barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×24 hay feed storage barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×24 hay feed storage barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×24 hay feed storage barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $135/month on a 16×24 hay feed storage barn.

What warranty comes with the 16×24 hay feed storage barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×24 hay feed storage barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×24 hay feed storage barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×24 hay feed storage barn typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Feed Storage Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit home with cupola, covered porch and lit garage at sunset

30×36 Barndominium Shell Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $22,600
12
30×36 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,750$22,600SAVE $3,150
or $471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Barndominium Shell

30×36 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,600$25,750Save $3,150
or as low as $471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×35
smaller
$21,950
30×36
this size
$22,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact barndo shell.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. Residential insulation package on the shell. The 30×36 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Living + kitchenBedroom + bathUtility / mech corner30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · compact barndo shell

Living + kitchen · Bedroom + bath · Utility / mech corner

Living + kitchen at the front, bedroom + bath in the middle, utility / mech corner at the rear. Capacity: 1-bed living shell.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 9-ft ceilings, covered entry.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🌾 30×36

Livestock Shelter with Lean-To

30×36 livestock shelter with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Shelter with Lean-To →
🏭 30×36

Welding and Fabrication Shop

30×36 welding and fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 barndominium shell cost?

A 30×36 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $22,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $471/month on a 30×36 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 barndominium shell typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit home with cupola, covered porch and lit garage at sunset

30×36 Barndominium Shell Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $22,600
12
30×36 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,750$22,600SAVE $3,150
or $471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Barndominium Shell

30×36 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,600$25,750Save $3,150
or as low as $471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×35
smaller
$21,950
30×36
this size
$22,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact barndo shell.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. Residential insulation package on the shell. The 30×36 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Living + kitchenBedroom + bathUtility / mech corner30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · compact barndo shell

Living + kitchen · Bedroom + bath · Utility / mech corner

Living + kitchen at the front, bedroom + bath in the middle, utility / mech corner at the rear. Capacity: 1-bed living shell.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 9-ft ceilings, covered entry.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🌾 30×36

Livestock Shelter with Lean-To

30×36 livestock shelter with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Shelter with Lean-To →
🏭 30×36

Welding and Fabrication Shop

30×36 welding and fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 barndominium shell cost?

A 30×36 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $22,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $471/month on a 30×36 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 barndominium shell typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with two tan roll-up doors in a desert valley at sunset

25×35 Detached Shop for Tradespeople Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople | Steel and Stud — From $11,100
12
25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Detached Shop Tradespeople

25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Detached Shop Tradespeople·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$11,100
30×35
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-DETACHED-SHOP-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your detached shop tradespeople layout.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. The 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · detached shop tradespeople layout

Detached Shop Tradespeople layout.

The 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Shop Tradespeople at 25×35 — stud-framed and insulation-ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Shop Tradespeople.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Shop Tradespeople spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Shop Tradespeople.

DAILY USEEveryday detached shop tradespeople
Everyday detached shop tradespeople
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached shop tradespeople.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached shop tradespeople + seasonal storage
detached shop tradespeople + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 detached shop tradespeople is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Shop Tradespeople shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Shop Tradespeople also viewed:

🏡 25×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

25×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 25×35

Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio

25×35 hobby mechanic & woodworking studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio →
🏡 25×35

Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop

25×35 split-bay garage with partitioned shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Shop Tradespeople questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople cost?

A 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 detached shop tradespeople price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud detached shop tradespeople ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached shop tradespeople different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 detached shop tradespeople?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 detached shop tradespeople in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 detached shop tradespeople typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Shop Tradespeople quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with two tan roll-up doors in a desert valley at sunset

25×35 Detached Shop for Tradespeople Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople | Steel and Stud — From $11,100
12
25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Detached Shop Tradespeople

25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Detached Shop Tradespeople·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$11,100
30×35
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-DETACHED-SHOP-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your detached shop tradespeople layout.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. The 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · detached shop tradespeople layout

Detached Shop Tradespeople layout.

The 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Shop Tradespeople at 25×35 — stud-framed and insulation-ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Shop Tradespeople.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Shop Tradespeople spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Shop Tradespeople.

DAILY USEEveryday detached shop tradespeople
Everyday detached shop tradespeople
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached shop tradespeople.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached shop tradespeople + seasonal storage
detached shop tradespeople + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 detached shop tradespeople is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Shop Tradespeople shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Detached Shop Tradespeople

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Shop Tradespeople also viewed:

🏡 25×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

25×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 25×35

Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio

25×35 hobby mechanic & woodworking studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio →
🏡 25×35

Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop

25×35 split-bay garage with partitioned shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Shop Tradespeople questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople cost?

A 25×35 detached shop tradespeople from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 detached shop tradespeople price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud detached shop tradespeople ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached shop tradespeople different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 detached shop tradespeople?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 detached shop tradespeople in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 detached shop tradespeople add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 detached shop tradespeople typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Shop Tradespeople quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Orange metal garage shop with gable roof, open overhead door, workbenches, and a parked pickup

30×36 Welding and Fabrication Shop Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $17,150
12
30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,550$17,150SAVE $2,400
or $357/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Welding Fabrication Shop

30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 welding fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Welding Fabrication Shop·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,150$19,550Save $2,400
or as low as $357/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×35
smaller
$16,650
30×36
this size
$17,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-WELDING-FABRICATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 30×36 welding fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Welding Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Welding Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Welding Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday welding fabrication shop
Everyday welding fabrication shop
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a welding fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwelding fabrication shop + seasonal storage
welding fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$357/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 welding fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $357/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Welding Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Welding Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🌾 30×36

Livestock Shelter with Lean-To

30×36 livestock shelter with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Shelter with Lean-To →
🏡 30×36

Barndominium Shell

30×36 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Welding Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 welding fabrication shop cost?

A 30×36 welding fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $17,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $357/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 welding fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud welding fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 welding fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud welding fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 welding fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 welding fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 welding fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $357/month on a 30×36 welding fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 welding fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 welding fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 welding fabrication shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 welding fabrication shop typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Welding Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Orange metal garage shop with gable roof, open overhead door, workbenches, and a parked pickup

30×36 Welding and Fabrication Shop Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $17,150
12
30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,550$17,150SAVE $2,400
or $357/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Welding Fabrication Shop

30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 welding fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Welding Fabrication Shop·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,150$19,550Save $2,400
or as low as $357/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×35
smaller
$16,650
30×36
this size
$17,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-WELDING-FABRICATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 30×36 welding fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Welding Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Welding Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Welding Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday welding fabrication shop
Everyday welding fabrication shop
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a welding fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwelding fabrication shop + seasonal storage
welding fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$357/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 welding fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $357/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Welding Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Welding Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Welding Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🌾 30×36

Livestock Shelter with Lean-To

30×36 livestock shelter with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Shelter with Lean-To →
🏡 30×36

Barndominium Shell

30×36 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Welding Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 welding fabrication shop cost?

A 30×36 welding fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $17,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $357/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 welding fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud welding fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 welding fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud welding fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 welding fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 welding fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 welding fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $357/month on a 30×36 welding fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 welding fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 welding fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 welding fabrication shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 welding fabrication shop typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Welding Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit detailing shop with black SUV and supply wall inside

25×35 Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio | Steel and Stud — From $13,900
12
25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,850$13,900SAVE $1,950
or $290/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio

25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,900$15,850Save $1,950
or as low as $290/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$13,900
30×35
wider
$16,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-HOBBY-MECHANIC-WBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your one-bay auto shop.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. 12-ft ceiling gives full lift travel. The 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Lift bayBench + tool wallParts shelving25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · one-bay auto shop

Lift bay · Bench + tool wall · Parts shelving

Lift bay at the front, bench + tool wall in the middle, parts shelving at the rear. Capacity: 1 two-post lift + bench work.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: two-post lift, compressor closet, waste-oil caddy.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby mechanic woodworking studio
Everyday hobby mechanic woodworking studio
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby mechanic woodworking studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby mechanic woodworking studio + seasonal storage
hobby mechanic woodworking studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$290/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $290/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

25×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 25×35

Detached Shop for Tradespeople

25×35 detached shop for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop for Tradespeople →
🏡 25×35

Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop

25×35 split-bay garage with partitioned shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio cost?

A 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio from Steel and Stud starts at $13,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $290/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby mechanic woodworking studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby mechanic woodworking studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $290/month on a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$13,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit detailing shop with black SUV and supply wall inside

25×35 Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio | Steel and Stud — From $13,900
12
25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,850$13,900SAVE $1,950
or $290/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio

25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,900$15,850Save $1,950
or as low as $290/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$13,900
30×35
wider
$16,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-HOBBY-MECHANIC-WBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your one-bay auto shop.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. 12-ft ceiling gives full lift travel. The 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Lift bayBench + tool wallParts shelving25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · one-bay auto shop

Lift bay · Bench + tool wall · Parts shelving

Lift bay at the front, bench + tool wall in the middle, parts shelving at the rear. Capacity: 1 two-post lift + bench work.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: two-post lift, compressor closet, waste-oil caddy.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby mechanic woodworking studio
Everyday hobby mechanic woodworking studio
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby mechanic woodworking studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby mechanic woodworking studio + seasonal storage
hobby mechanic woodworking studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$290/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $290/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

25×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 25×35

Detached Shop for Tradespeople

25×35 detached shop for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop for Tradespeople →
🏡 25×35

Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop

25×35 split-bay garage with partitioned shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio cost?

A 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio from Steel and Stud starts at $13,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $290/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby mechanic woodworking studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby mechanic woodworking studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $290/month on a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 hobby mechanic woodworking studio typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Mechanic Woodworking Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Home gym inside a black metal building with dumbbell rack, bench and wall TV

16×24 Home Gym & Fitness Studio Metal Building Kit

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×24 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio | Steel and Stud — From $9,300
12
16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×24Home Gym Fitness Studio

16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×24 home gym fitness studio from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Fitness Studio·Size16×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×24
16×24
this size
$9,300
16×28
longer
$10,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 384 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X24-HOME-GYM-FITNESSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

16 feet wide × 24 feet long. R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation keeps it usable year-round. The 16×24 home gym fitness studio from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

Rack + barbell zoneCardio cornerMat / stretch area16′ × 24′ · 384 sq ft · home-gym layout

Rack + barbell zone · Cardio corner · Mat / stretch area

Rack + barbell zone at the front, cardio corner in the middle, mat / stretch area at the rear. Capacity: 1-2 person training space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rubber flooring, mirror wall, pull-up rig.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Fitness Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Fitness Studio spec sheet.

Width16'
Length24' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Fitness Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym fitness studio
Everyday home gym fitness studio
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym fitness studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym fitness studio + seasonal storage
home gym fitness studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio — what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×24 home gym fitness studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×24?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 24′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Fitness Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Fitness Studio also viewed:

🏡 16×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

16×24 single-car metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →
🏡 16×24

Metal Workshop

16×24 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Storage Shed

16×24 storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Shed →
🏡 16×24

Backyard Home Office

16×24 backyard home office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Home Office →
🏡 16×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

16×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →
🏡 16×24

Pool House

16×24 pool house configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House →
🌾 16×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

16×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →
🌾 16×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

16×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →
🎯 16×24

ATV and Toy Storage

16×24 atv and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV and Toy Storage →
🎯 16×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

16×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Carport with Storage Bay

16×24 carport with storage bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Bay →
🏢 16×24

Small Business Storefront

16×24 small business storefront configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Storefront →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Fitness Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 16×24 home gym fitness studio cost?

A 16×24 home gym fitness studio from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×24 home gym fitness studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym fitness studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×24 home gym fitness studio?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym fitness studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×24 home gym fitness studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×24 home gym fitness studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×24 home gym fitness studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 16×24 home gym fitness studio.

What warranty comes with the 16×24 home gym fitness studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×24 home gym fitness studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×24 home gym fitness studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×24 home gym fitness studio typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Fitness Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Home gym inside a black metal building with dumbbell rack, bench and wall TV

16×24 Home Gym & Fitness Studio Metal Building Kit

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×24 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio | Steel and Stud — From $9,300
12
16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×24Home Gym Fitness Studio

16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×24 home gym fitness studio from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Fitness Studio·Size16×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×24
16×24
this size
$9,300
16×28
longer
$10,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 384 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X24-HOME-GYM-FITNESSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

16 feet wide × 24 feet long. R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation keeps it usable year-round. The 16×24 home gym fitness studio from Steel and Stud puts 384 sq ft to work.

Rack + barbell zoneCardio cornerMat / stretch area16′ × 24′ · 384 sq ft · home-gym layout

Rack + barbell zone · Cardio corner · Mat / stretch area

Rack + barbell zone at the front, cardio corner in the middle, mat / stretch area at the rear. Capacity: 1-2 person training space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rubber flooring, mirror wall, pull-up rig.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Fitness Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Fitness Studio spec sheet.

Width16'
Length24' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Fitness Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym fitness studio
Everyday home gym fitness studio
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym fitness studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym fitness studio + seasonal storage
home gym fitness studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio — what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×24 home gym fitness studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×24?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 24′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Fitness Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×24 Home Gym Fitness Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Fitness Studio also viewed:

🏡 16×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

16×24 single-car metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →
🏡 16×24

Metal Workshop

16×24 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Storage Shed

16×24 storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Shed →
🏡 16×24

Backyard Home Office

16×24 backyard home office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Home Office →
🏡 16×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

16×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →
🏡 16×24

Pool House

16×24 pool house configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House →
🌾 16×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

16×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →
🌾 16×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

16×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →
🎯 16×24

ATV and Toy Storage

16×24 atv and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV and Toy Storage →
🎯 16×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

16×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →
🏡 16×24

Carport with Storage Bay

16×24 carport with storage bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Bay →
🏢 16×24

Small Business Storefront

16×24 small business storefront configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Storefront →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Fitness Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 16×24 home gym fitness studio cost?

A 16×24 home gym fitness studio from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×24 home gym fitness studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym fitness studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×24 home gym fitness studio?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym fitness studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×24 home gym fitness studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×24 home gym fitness studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×24 home gym fitness studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 16×24 home gym fitness studio.

What warranty comes with the 16×24 home gym fitness studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×24 home gym fitness studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×24 home gym fitness studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×24 home gym fitness studio typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Fitness Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel garage with two white roll-up doors and lean-to sheltering boat and ATVs

30×36 Boat and Trailer Storage Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Boat Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $13,700
12
30×36 Boat Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,600$13,700SAVE $1,900
or $285/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Boat Trailer Storage

30×36 Boat Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Boat Trailer Storage·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,700$15,600Save $1,900
or as low as $285/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×36
this size
$13,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. The 30×36 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 32ft + a second toy.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Boat Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat trailer storage
Everyday boat trailer storage
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Boat Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$285/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 boat trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $285/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Boat Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Boat Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🌾 30×36

Livestock Shelter with Lean-To

30×36 livestock shelter with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Shelter with Lean-To →
🏡 30×36

Barndominium Shell

30×36 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏭 30×36

Welding and Fabrication Shop

30×36 welding and fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 boat trailer storage cost?

A 30×36 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $285/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 boat trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 boat trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 boat trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 boat trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 boat trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $285/month on a 30×36 boat trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 boat trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 boat trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 boat trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 boat trailer storage typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$13,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel garage with two white roll-up doors and lean-to sheltering boat and ATVs

30×36 Boat and Trailer Storage Metal Building Kit

1,080 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×36 steel building delivers 1,080 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×36 Boat Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $13,700
12
30×36 Boat Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,600$13,700SAVE $1,900
or $285/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×36Boat Trailer Storage

30×36 Boat Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×36 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Boat Trailer Storage·Size30×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,700$15,600Save $1,900
or as low as $285/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×36
30×36
this size
$13,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,080 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,080 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X36-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

30 feet wide × 36 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. The 30×36 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,080 sq ft to work.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone30′ × 36′ · 1,080 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 32ft + a second toy.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×36 Boat Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,080 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width30'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,080 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat trailer storage
Everyday boat trailer storage
1,080 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×36 Boat Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

1,080sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$285/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×36 boat trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $285/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×36?

1,080 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 36′ footprint with 1,080 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,640–$12,960 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×36 Boat Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×36 Boat Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 30×36

Three-Car Detached Garage

30×36 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 30×36

Workshop and Hobby Shop

30×36 workshop and hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Shop →
🌾 30×36

Horse Barn with Stalls

30×36 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🎯 30×36

RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop

30×36 rv cover with enclosed workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Workshop →
🏢 30×36

Contractor Shop and Storage

30×36 contractor shop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop and Storage →
🌾 30×36

Equipment and Hay Barn

30×36 equipment and hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Barn →
🏡 30×36

Man Cave and Garage Combo

30×36 man cave and garage combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and Garage Combo →
🏢 30×36

Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay

30×36 small fleet storage and service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fleet Storage and Service Bay →
🌾 30×36

Livestock Shelter with Lean-To

30×36 livestock shelter with lean-to configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Shelter with Lean-To →
🏡 30×36

Barndominium Shell

30×36 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏭 30×36

Welding and Fabrication Shop

30×36 welding and fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →
🎯 30×36

Boat and Toy Storage

30×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 30×36 boat trailer storage cost?

A 30×36 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $285/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×36 boat trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×36 boat trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,080+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×36 boat trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×36 boat trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×36 boat trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $285/month on a 30×36 boat trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 30×36 boat trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×36 boat trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×36 boat trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×36 boat trailer storage typically adds $8,640–$12,960 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel structure garage with brown roll-up door surrounded by desert agave and cactus

25×35 Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop | Steel and Stud — From $11,100
12
25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×35Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop

25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop·Size25×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×35
25×35
this size
$11,100
30×35
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 875 sq ft enclosed
  • 875 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X35-SPLIT-BAY-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

25 feet wide × 35 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop from Steel and Stud puts 875 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools25′ × 35′ · 875 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
875 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop spec sheet.

Width25'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space875 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday split bay garage partitioned shop
Everyday split bay garage partitioned shop
875 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a split bay garage partitioned shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsplit bay garage partitioned shop + seasonal storage
split bay garage partitioned shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop — what makes it different.

875sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×35?

875 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 35′ footprint with 875 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,000–$10,500 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop also viewed:

🏡 25×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

25×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 25×35

Detached Shop for Tradespeople

25×35 detached shop for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop for Tradespeople →
🎯 25×35

Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio

25×35 hobby mechanic & woodworking studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Mechanic & Woodworking Studio →
🎯 25×35

Single RV or Camper Cover

25×35 single rv or camper cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single RV or Camper Cover →
🌾 25×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

25×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 25×35

Man Cave or She Shed Conversion

25×35 man cave or she shed conversion configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Conversion →
🏢 25×35

Home Office or Studio

25×35 home office or studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office or Studio →
🌾 25×35

Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls)

25×35 small horse barn (two stalls) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn (Two Stalls) →
🏭 25×35

Storage Building for Inventory

25×35 storage building for inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Inventory →
🎯 25×35

Boat or Jet Ski Storage

25×35 boat or jet ski storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat or Jet Ski Storage →
🏛️ 25×35

Community or Church Storage

25×35 community or church storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community or Church Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop cost?

A 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud split bay garage partitioned shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop?

Almost always for 875+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud split bay garage partitioned shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop.

What warranty comes with the 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×35 split bay garage partitioned shop typically adds $7,000–$10,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel structure garage with brown roll-up door surrounded by desert agave and cactus

25×35 Split-Bay Garage with Partitioned Shop Metal Building Kit

875 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×35 steel building delivers 875 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop | Steel and Stud — From $11,100
12
25×35 Split Bay Garage Partitioned Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check